PROJECT MANUAL ORF HVAC RENOVATION

Norfolk International Airport HVAC Renovation Project Location Gresham Smith Project No.: 42426.30

Project Title Page 00 0101 - 1 of 1

PROJECT MANUAL

ORF HVAC RENOVATION

VOLUME 2

NORFOLK AIRPORT

IFB #: 2021-05-02

NORFOLK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

NORFOLK , VIRGINIA 23518-5807

MAY 2, 2021

PREPARED BY:

GRESHAM SMITH


Table of Contents 00 0110 - 1 of 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Project Title Page

Table of Contents

Invitation for Bids

Instructions to Bidders

Bid Form

References Form

Standard Contract with Norfolk International Airport Authority

SIDA Badge Application Instructions and Check List

Federally Required Contract Provisions

General Terms and Conditions for Construction Contracts

Special Security Measures - Terminal Construction

Contractor Off Airfield Insurance Requirement

Standard Payment Bond

Standard Performance Bond

Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Claims

Contractor's Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion

Architect's Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion

Contractor’s Certificate of Final Completion

Architect's Certificate of Final Completion

Owner Provided Surveys and Specifications

Limited Asbestos Sampling of Pipe Insulation dated October 24, 2019

Limited Asbestos Survey Report dated March 3, 2021

Engineering Controls for Asbestos Containing Materials

SPECIFICATIONS

Division 01 -- General Requirements

01 0000 - General Requirements

01 1000 - Summary of Work

01 2300 - Alternates

01 2500 - Substitution Procedures

01 2500 - Substitution Request Form

01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures

01 2900 - Payment Procedures

01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination

01 3200 - Execution

01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule

01 3300 - Submittal Procedures

01 4000 - Quality Requirements



01 4519 - Uncovering and Correction of Work

01 4533 - Structural Tests and Inspections

01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 6000 - Product Requirements

01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 7700 - Closeout Procedures

01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data

01 7839 - Project Record Documents

01 7900 - Demonstration and Training

VOLUME 2

Project Title Page

Table of Contents

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 4119 - Selective Demolition

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 5400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

DIVISION - 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07 7100 - Roof Specialties

07 9200 - Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 9113 - Exterior Painting

09 9123 - Interior Painting IFC 00.00.0000

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING

230000 - mechanical and Plumbing General Provisions

230523 - General-duty Valves for HVAC Piping

230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

230548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

230713 - Duct Insulation

230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation

230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC



230910 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers

232113 - Hydronic Piping

233113 - Metal Ducts

236500 - Cooling Towers

237313 - Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 - Electrical General Provisions

260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

260544 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems

262816 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

END OF SECTION

Norfolk International AirportHVAC RenovationProject LocationGresham Smith Project No.: 42426.30

Selective Demolition 02 4119 - 1 of 6

SECTION 02 4119SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 1000: Restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and

phasing requirements.2. Section 01 7300: Cutting and patching procedures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove : Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to beremoved and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction in manner to prevent damage, anddeliver to Owner[ ready for reuse].

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstallwhere indicated. Provide new fasteners and anchorage devices needed for reinstallation.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and thatare not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

E. Dismantle : To remove by disassembling or detaching item from a surface, using gentle methods andequipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to besalvaged or reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site per requirements of Section 01 3100.1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by

selective demolition operations.5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measuresproposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control and, for noise control. Indicateproposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for

each activity. Ensure Owner and Owner's tenants on-site operations are uninterrupted.2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's

partial occupancy of completed Work.



C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, includingfinish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply withSection 01 3233. Submit before Work begins.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. List salvaged items.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Disclaimer: Drawings are based on information supplied by the Owner that has not been verified bythe Architect or its consultants. The Architect therefore disclaims any warranty of correctness orcompleteness and Contractor is cautioned to carefully examine existing conditions before startingdemolition operations.1. Locations and sizes of existing construction elements may vary from those depicted on the

Drawings.2. The locations of utilities concealed in or by existing construction are unknown, and Contractor is

cautioned to exercise care when removing construction elements to accommodate newconstruction.

B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conductselective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

C. Occupancy: See Section 01 1000. Owner reserves right to require work that affects Owner's normaluse to be performed outside normal hours of occupancy or to be rescheduled without changes toContract Sum or Time. Provide barricades and guards as needed for safety of occupants or asrequired by governing authorities.

D. Occupancy: Portions of the building will remain in normal use by Owner and lease tenants. Requestpermission at least [5] working days before operations that would affect occupants' normal useincluding work within individual tenant spaces, temporary blocking of corridors or access, and loud,malodorous, or dusty procedures. Owner reserves right to require such work to be performed outsidenormal hours of occupancy or to be rescheduled without changes to Contract Sum or Time.

E. Exits: Maintain existing required means of egress for occupied spaces in lawful condition at all times.

F. Existing Elevators: Do not use existing elevators.

G. Removal Routes: Confine removal of demolished materials to designated routes through building.

H. Contractor is responsible for cleaning and repair of soiling and damage resulting from demolitionoperations inside or outside the building, and on other properties.

I. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far aspractical.

J. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding withselective demolition.

K. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on thepresence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware oflocations where hazardous materials are present.1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

L. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris for minimal interference with streets,sidewalks, and other nearby properties and facilities.1. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, or other nearby properties without permission from

authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic pathsif required by governing authorities.



M. Keep site and other areas clean and free from accumulation of debris and waste from demolitionoperations.

N. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them againstdamage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities,except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services duringinterruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. Maintain fire protectionservices during selective demolition operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damagedduring selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as notto void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include thefollowing:

B. 1.

C. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying thatexisting system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Projectcloseout.

1.10 PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning

selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction.

2. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.11 PART 3 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.2. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner and Architect specifically disclaimany warranty that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

3. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with buildingdemolition operations.

B. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS1. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.2. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areasto be selectively demolished.a. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.b. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintaincontinuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

c. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVACsystems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.1) Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.2) Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material and leave in place.3) Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.4) Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, andmake equipment operational.

5) Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and removeequipment and deliver to Owner.



6) Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plugremaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

7) Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatibleductwork material and leave in place.

C. PROTECTION1. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.a. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.b. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakageand damage to structure and interior areas.

c. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that areexposed during selective demolition operations.

d. Cover and protect furniture, supplies, and equipment that have not been removed.e. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."2. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction andfinishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse ofconstruction being demolished.a. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

D. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference

with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.2. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and

as indicated.3. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective

demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the nextlower level.

4. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cuttingmethods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand toolsor small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarilycover openings to remain.

5. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existingfinished surfaces.

6. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealedspaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space beforestarting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.a. Maintain fire watch during and for at least hours after flame-cutting

operations.b. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials andpromptly dispose of off-site.

8. Lower demolished materials to ground level in controlled manner. Materials may not be droppedfrom above unless they are confined by a chute that opens into an enclosed waste container.a. Construction of a chute is Contractor's option.b. Location of such a chute is subject to approval by Owner.c. Reinstall existing windows removed for building a chute when chute is removed, and return

them to original condition.9. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall

and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.10. Transport demolished materials through building to exterior in containers with solid sides and

bottoms. Transport dusty, liquid, and hazardous demolished materials in fully enclosedcontainers.

11. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to imposeexcessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

12. Remove tile and other modular materials to joint with next unit unless otherwise indicated.13. Remove existing sealants and caulking as needed for installation of new work, and where they

would be exposed to view in the finished work.



14. New Openings in Supported Floors: Provide structural platform below each new opening tosupport weight of removed structure and to ensure that no pieces fall to floor below. Cut andremove existing concrete slab in small pieces and do not allow pieces to fall. Cut perimeters ofnew openings with power saws to provide accurate, straight edges. Where new perimeterstructural supports are shown, do not cut openings until permanent supports have beeninstalled.

15. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soilingduring selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in theiroriginal locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

E. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS1. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one

day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight andweathertight. See Section for new roofing requirements.a. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.b. Remove existing roofing system down to bare slab.

2. HVAC: Do not remove functioning HVAC components that serve occupied tenant spaces untilcorresponding new HVAC systems are in use unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Provide temporary conditioning as required for continuity.

3. Electrical Items: Do not remove functioning electrical wiring and devices that serve occupiedtenant spaces until corresponding new electrical systems are in use.

F. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS1. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.a. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.b. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.c. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.d. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419.

G. REPAIRS1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to

remain to not less than original condition. Repair existing construction or surfaces soiled ordamaged by selective demolition operations.

2. Promptly repair damages caused by demolition operations to existing construction indicated toremain, including areas of facility outside Project limits.

3. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for newmaterials.

4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoiningconstruction to remain in manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

5. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in new space where demolished walls or partitionsextend one finished area into another. Provide flush, even surface of uniform color andappearance.a. Match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.b. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with tolerances

specified for new Work.c. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken

surface containing patch after surface has received primer and second coat.d. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials if necessary to

achieve uniform color and appearance.e. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of installation.

6. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings to provide even, plane surface of uniform appearance.

H. CLEANING1. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolitionoperations began.

2. Change filters on air handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.3. Remove protections, and temporary partitions and closures when no longer needed or when

directed by Architect.



©2021 GRESHAM SMITH. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. USE SUBJECT TO ANY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITHGRESHAM SMITH.

END OF SECTION


Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 4000 - 1 of 3

SECTION 05 4000COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES1.02 FORMED STEEL STUD EXTERIOR WALL AND INTERIOR WALL FRAMING.

A. Cavity blanket insulationB. Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.C. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.2. Section: 07 5419 -PVC Thermoplastic Single-Ply Roofing: Roof Sheahting and Board .

D. REFERENCE STANDARDSE. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members 2012.F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 2016a.G. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2020.H. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members

2018.I. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and

Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories 2020.J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") 2002 (Ed.

2004).K. SUBMITTALS

1. See Section 01 3300 for submittal procedures.2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors,

showing compliance with requirements.3. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage,

loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items requiredof related work.a. Design data:

1) Shop drawings signed and sealed by a professional structural engineer.4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions

requiring special attention.L. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of aProfessional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in theState in which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

B. Design Requirements: Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineerlicensed in the state where the project is located to design all cold-formed steel framing andto prepare the submittals outlined in Part 1 of this specification. Provide completed framingsystem having the following characteristics:1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members

according to AISI S100-12.2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified

design loads for project conditions within required limits.



3. Design Loads: and as indicated on Strucutral Drawings4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/180 of span.5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue

stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclicday/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structuralmembers, and clearances of intended openings.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALSA. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with

punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and Depth: As required to meet specified performance levels.2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G60/Z180 coating.

B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot

dipped galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gage, 0.1345 inch,and factory punched holes and slots.

2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicablecode, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.

3. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation,floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, andstiffeners.

2.03 FASTENERSA. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM

A153/A153M.B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.

2.04 WALL SHEATHING2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20 Type I - Inorganic, complyingwith VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Cavity Blanket Insulation: Unfaced, mineral wool blanket insulation ASTM C 665, Type I(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread andsmoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136for combustion characteristics.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDSA. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007

requirements.B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at

maximum 24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceilingtracks.

C. Periodic special inspection shall be provided by the special inspector, coordinated by theContractor, during the construction of load and non‑load bearing walls per the requirementsspecified in Division 1 Specification "Structural Tests and Inspections".

3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHINGA. Install wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm

bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.



1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edgesand ends.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BLANKET INSULATIONA. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. If more than

one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit betweenends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce friction fit betweenedges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

©2021 GRESHAM SMITH. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. USE SUBJECT TO ANY WRITTENAGREEMENT WITH GRESHAM SMITH.

END OF SECTION


Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 1053 - 1 of 4

SECTION 06 1053MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Wood blocking and nailers.2. Plywood backing panels.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 07 5419, PVC Membrane Roofing2. Section 07 6200, Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim3. Section 07 7100, Roof Specialties

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size inleast dimension.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare submittals per requirements of Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materialsand dimensions and include construction and application details.1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials complying with requirements. Indicate type ofpreservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certificationby treating plant that treated materials complying with requirements. Include physical propertiesof treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber, both before and afterexposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agencyaccording to ASTM D5664.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:1. Preservative-treated wood.2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.3. Power-driven fasteners.4. Post-installed anchors.5. Metal framing anchors.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protectlumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheets suitably anchored. Provide for air circulationaround stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency isindicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certifiedby the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board ofReview to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic

or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material thatis warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board ofReview.

D. Application: Treat [all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members

in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply withrequirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test methodindicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spreadindex of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significantprogressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame frontnot extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to acceleratedweathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood aftertreatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in

connection with roofing.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thicknessindicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in thisarticle for material and manufacture.1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in

area of high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 as appropriate for the substrate.1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy

Group 1 or 2.

2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.2. KC Metals Products, Inc.3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.5. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 .1. Use for all locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fitcarpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiringbacking panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking oftesting agency exposed to view.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fastenersthrough each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips notmore than 16 inches o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fasteningother materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member orpieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuousflexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying withthe following:1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapesindicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with otherwork involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfacesunless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not lessthan 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finishmaterial. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.



3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply boratesolution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous roughcarpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying tocomply with EPA-registered label.


END OF SECTION


Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 5400 - 1 of 6

SECTION 07 5400THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fully adhered, single ply PVC-KEE membrane roofing assembly

B. Insulation, flat and tapered.

C. Vapor retarder.

D. Deck sheathing.

E. Cover boards.

F. Flashings.

G. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.

B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings and reglets.

C. Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Prefabricated roofing expansion joint flashing.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures MostRecent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and ThermalTransmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus 2019.

C. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board 2012 (Reapproved 2017).

D. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation 2017, with EditorialRevision (2018).

E. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means ofthe Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2017.

F. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 2018.

G. ASTM C726 - Standard Specification for Mineral Wool Roof Insulation Board 2017.

H. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use asSheathing 2013.

I. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel 2017.

J. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal InsulationBoard 2019.

K. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017.

L. ASTM D4434/D4434M - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing 2015.

M. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 2016.

N. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide current edition.



O. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design 2016.

P. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of ExteriorNon-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components 2019.

Q. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual 2019.

R. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual 2005.

S. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory Current Edition.

T. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with

related work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vaporretarder, and fasteners .

C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings that indicate joint or termination detail conditions and conditions ofinterface with other materials. Submit an accurate layout of the insulation showing the slopes to thedrains. Show cross section drawings illustrating the location and thickness of insulation pieces. Submitfastener and adhesive attachment patterns from the roof system manufacturer showing theappropriate numbers, spacing and patterns for the insulation attachments for each deck type asrequired to meet the wind uplift as indicated on Structural Drawings.

D. Provide a Manufacturer's Roof Assembly Letter confirming the proposed roofing assembly system,components and proposed installation procedure Submitted by the Contractor are in accordance withand will be warranted as specified by the Roofing System manufacturer.

E. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inches in size illustrating insulation andmembrane .

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeterconditions requiring special attention.

H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, windvelocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.

I. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

J. Installer's Qualification Statement.

K. Warranty Documentation:1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name

and registered with manufacturer.2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with warranty conditions for waterproof

membrane.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum Twenty (20) years of documented experience.



B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at least 10years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer. Installer must extendmanufacturer's labor and materials guarantee, as well as manfacturer's No Dollar Limit guarantee.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labelsintact.

B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

C. Ensure storage and staging of materials does not exceed static and dynamic load-bearing capacitiesof roof decking.

D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.


A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is beyond manufacturer's specifiedinstallation temperature.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected oroccurring.

D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can beweatherproofed the same day.

E. Schedule applications so that no partially completed sections of roof are left exposed at end ofworkday.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Division 1 Sections for additional warranty requirements.

B. Material Contractor’s workmanship and watertight guarantee for a period of two years from date ofSubstantial Completion of the entire project.

C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's manufacturer’s printed 20 Year, No Dollar Limit, full systemedge to edge warranty covering workmanship and materials for the Work of this Section. The warrantyshall include, but not be limited to, repair of leakage, and the repair and/or replacement of the roofingsystem caused by defects in materials or workmanship.1. Warranty Term: 20 years from project Substantial Completion.2. Secure the manufacturer’s approval of the project and all components of the project prior to

bidding.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Thermoplastic Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) with Elvaloy KEE (Ketone Ethylene Ester) resin modifier.Membrane Roofing Materials:1. Basis-of-Design: Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure-Flex PVC KEE: www.carlisle-syntec.com.2. Johns Manville ; JM PVC 60 : www.jm.com.3. Sika Corporation Roofing; Sarnafil PVC: usa.sika.com/sarnafil.

B. Insulation:1. As recommended by and listed in Manufacturer's Roof Assembly Letter.

2.2 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS

A. Membrane Roofing Materials:



1. PVC/KEE: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with Elvaloy KEE resin modifier complying with ASTMD4434/D4434M, Type II, sheet contains reinforcing fibers or reinforcing fabrics.a. Thickness: 60 mil, 0.060 inch , minimum.

2. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible.3. Color: Tan .

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Vapor Retarder: Material approved by roof manufacturer complying with requirements of fire ratingclassification; compatible with roofing and insulation materials.1. Fire-retardant adhesive.2. Vapor Permeability: .015 perm inch , measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.3. Product: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.

2.3 ROOF BOARD AND COVER BOARDS

A. Roof Board and Cover Boards: Gypsum panels complying with ASTM C1177/C1177M and asrecommended by membrane manufacturer and listed in manfacturer's Roof Assembly Letter.1. Thickness: 1/2 inch , fire resistant.2. Manufacturers:

a. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck Prime with EONIC Technology: www.densdeck.com/#sle.

2.4 INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289.1. Classifications:

a. Type I: Faced with aluminum foil on both major surfaces of the core foam.1) Class 1 - Non-reinforced core foam.2) Compressive Strength: Grade 3, 25 PSI, minimum.3) Thermal Resistance, R-value: At 1-1/2 inch thick; 9.0 at 75 degrees F.

2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch.3. Board Thickness: 1.5 inch.4. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/2" inch ; fabricate of fewest layers

possible.5. Board Edges: Square.6. Manufacturers: as recommended by membrane manufacturer and listed in manfacturer's Roof

Assembly Letter.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same materialas membrane.

B. Cant and Edge Strips: Wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing materials; cants formed to 45 degreeangle.

C. Sheathing Joint Tape: as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer,compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering.

E. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

F. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.

G. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane.

H. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

I. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.



J. Walkway Pads: Suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually distinctivefrom roof membrane.1. Composition: Roofing membrane manufacturer's standard .2. Size: Manufacturers standard size .3. Surface Color: Tan

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify deck is supported and secure.

C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped andsuitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.

E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are inplace.

3.2 CONCRETE DECK PREPARATION

A. Fill surface honeycomb and variations with latex filler.

B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NRCA (RM), and NRCA (WM)applicable requirements.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature rangerecommended by manufacturer.

D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected oroccurring.

E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can beweatherproofed the same day.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDER AND INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE

A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge.2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and seal

to provide continuity of the air barrier plane.

B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation.

C. Attachment of Insulation: Embed each layer of insulation in adhesive in full contact, in accordancewith roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.

D. Cover Boards: Mechanically fasten cover boards in accordance with roofing manufacturer'sinstructions and FM (AG) Factory Mutual requirements.

E. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of precedinglayer.



F. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeterblocking and around penetrations through roof.

G. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.

H. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches.

I. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.

3.5 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.

B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.

C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate recommended by manufacturer and asindicated in Roof Manufacturer's Assembly letter and submittal. Fully embed membrane in adhesiveexcept in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll beforeproceeding to adjacent rolls.

D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanentlywaterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.

E. At intersections with vertical surfaces:1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces.2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.

F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.

G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control andinspection.

B. Notify Architect in advance of installation of vapor retarder and insulation installation to allow forobservation during installation prior to covering up.

3.7 CLEANING

A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements.

B. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

C. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfacesfor cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.

D. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.

B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.


END OF SECTION


Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6200 - 1 of 3

SECTION 07 6200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, exterior penetrations, and otheritems indicated in Schedule .

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work.

B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Field fabricated roof curbs.


A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for HighPerformance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix)2017a.

B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for SuperiorPerforming Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix)2017a.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-IronAlloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2020.

D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 2015.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.

F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)2014.

G. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.

H. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing andWaterproofing 2017.

I. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free 2007(Reapproved 2018).

J. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook current edition.

K. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 2012.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,flashings, terminations, and installation details.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 6" by 6" inch in size illustrating metal finish color.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standarddetails, except as otherwise indicated.



B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 10 years of documented experience.


A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metalsheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage,(0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;

multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) ; 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; plain finish shoppre-coated with fluoropolymer coating.1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally

cured fluoropolymer finish system.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 alloy, soft temper, 28 gage, (0.0156 inch) thick; smooth No. 4- Brushed finish.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealedlapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.

B. Underlayment: ASTM D 1970 Self-adhering, high temperature sheet membrane underlayment

C. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

D. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant.

E. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability asrecommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material.

F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.

G. Reglets: Surface mounted type, stainless steel ; face and ends covered with plastic tape .



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets inplace, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels, and seal top of reglets with sealant.

C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of15 mil.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with drawing details.

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted..

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

D. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and linesaccurate to profiles.

E. Seal metal joints watertight.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.

B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specifiedrequirements.


END OF SECTION


Roof Specialties 07 7100 - 1 of 2

SECTION 07 7100ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings and pre-manufactured copings. .


A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim


A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures forPigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix)2017a.

B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for HighPerformance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix)2017a.

C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for SuperiorPerforming Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix)2017a.

D. ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 - Test Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems2017.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.

F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,Profiles, and Tubes 2014.

G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,Profiles, and Tubes (Metric) 2013.

H. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free 2007(Reapproved 2018).

I. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual 2019.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types andlocations.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, requiredclearances and tolerances, and other affected work.

D. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of coping .

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, fasteners, supporting members,and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Copings:1. Metal-Era Inc; Perma-Tite : www.metalera.com.


Roof Specialties 07 7100 - 2 of 2

2. Metal Roofing Systems, Inc; Rapid Lock Coping: www.metalroofingsystems.biz.3. OMG Roofing Products; PermaSnap Coping : www.omgroofing.com.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at joints

of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 using test method

RE-3 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable local buildingcode.

3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick, minimum.4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.3 FINISHES

A. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiplecoat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant for Joints in Linear Components: As recommended by component manufacturer.

B. Adhesive for Anchoring to Roof Membrane: Compatible with roof membrane and approved by roofmembrane manufacturer.

C. Roof Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Sectionare in place and positioned correctly.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicablerequirements.

B. Seal joints within components when required by component manufacturer.

C. Anchor components securely.

D. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and baseflashings.

E. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure watertightness.

F. Coordinate installation of flashing flanges into reglets.


END OF SECTION


Joint Sealants 07 9200 - 1 of 5

SECTION 07 9200JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.

B. Joint backings and accessories.


A. Division 23 HVAC related work.


A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants byMeans of a Durometer 2015.

B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.

C. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants 2017.

D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.

E. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants withAccessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems 2016.

F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2016.

G. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants 2008(Reapproved 2012).

H. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants 2014.

I. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants 2018.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used,that includes the following.1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and

color availability.2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.4. Substrates the product should not be used on.5. Substrates for which use of primer is required.6. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing materials

and tools.7. Sample product warranty.8. Certification by manufacturer indicating that product complies with specification requirements.

C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product tobe used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of installation.

E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

F. Installer's Qualification Statement.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at leastthree years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer .

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each combination ofsealant, substrate, backing, and accessories.1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794.2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087.3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work.4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing.5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or

techniques not indicated in product data submittals.6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not older

than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedure for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping.1. Dow Chemical Company: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-

construction.html/#sle.2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle.3. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.4. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS

A. Scope:1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless

specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to,the following items.a. Joints between different exposed materials.b. Other joints indicated below.

2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior jointsto be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.b. Other joints indicated below.

3. Do not seal the following types of joints.a. Intentional weepholes in masonry.b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type

of sealing device.c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed.d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.

B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.1. Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing.2. Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, non-curing.



C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.2. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid

immersion.

D. Interior Wet Areas: fixtures in wet areas.

2.3 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL

A. Colors: Match colors of adjacent materials.

2.4 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstandcontinuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent , minimum.2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1248.3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.4. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.5. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.6. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Company; DOWSIL 795 Silicone Building Sealant: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.

b. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 890 NST (Non-Staining Technology): www.pecora.com/#sle.c. Sika Corporation; Sikasil WS-290: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.d. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 1:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.

B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; notexpected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent , minimum.2. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F.4. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation; DynaFlex: www.pecora.com/#sle.b. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1a: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.c. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-15 LM: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.d. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c NS: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.e. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Dymonic 100:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.f. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Dymeric 240 FC:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.

C. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding,non-sagging; not intended for exterior use.1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces, Type OP (opaque).2. Grade: ASTM C834; Grade Minus 18 Degrees C (0 Degrees F).3. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 +Silicone: www.pecora.com/#sle.b. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremflex 834:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Non-Curing Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based, single component, non-sag, non-skinning, non-hardening,non-bleeding; non-vapor-permeable; intended for fully concealed applications.1. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation; Pecora BA-98 Non-Skinning Butyl Sealant: www.pecora.com/#sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.5 ACCESSORIES



A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible withspecific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specificapplication.1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O - Open

Cell Polyurethane.2. Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width.3. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width.4. Manufacturers:

a. ADFAST Corporation; ADSEAL BR-2600 (Backer Rod): www.adfastcorp.com/#sle.b. Nomaco, Inc; HBR: www.nomaco.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to andrecommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.

C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive residue, andcompatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.

D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer;compatible with joint forming materials.

E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.

C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work;be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces andmaterial installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, andsurface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions areindicated.

D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without gettingsealant on adjacent surfaces.

F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperaturerange, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval isobtained and instructions are followed.



G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tapeimmediately after tooling sealant surface.


END OF SECTION


Exterior Painting 09 9113 - 1 of 5

SECTION 09 9113EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints.

C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied

primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Hot-dipped galvanized metals.6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, zinc, and lead.7. Floors, unless specifically indicated.8. Glass.9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits, unless specified in other Sections.


A. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.

B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.

C. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Color coding scheme for items to bepainted under this section.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Color coding scheme for items to be paintedunder this section.


A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications 2016.

B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 2005 (Reapproved2017).

C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials 2016.

D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current Edition.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).

F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007.

G. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each:



1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g."alkyd enamel").

2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.

C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range ofcolors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finishwas used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaninginstructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of eachcolor and finish used.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where

directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified withminimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer .


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructionsfor mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature rangesrequired by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing ofsubstrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside thehumidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.



B. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly

dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable ofdrying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a singleproduction run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint E-OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete,concrete masonry units, brick, fiber cement siding, primed wood, and primed metal.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Latex; MPI #10, 11, 15, 119, or 214.3. Top Coat Sheen:

a. At locations where directly adjacent to existing constructionm match existing sheen.b. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all stand-alone locations.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer oftop coats.1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer; MPI #3.2. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler; MPI #4.3. Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #79.4. Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #76.5. Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Primer for Aluminum; MPI #95.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials,and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any conditionthat may potentially effect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best resultfor the substrate under the project conditions.



C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects.

D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.

E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate andbleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Concrete:1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer'swritten instructions.

2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1,500 to 4,000 psi at 6 to 12inches. Allow to dry.

3. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.4. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 13.

H. Masonry:1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's writteninstructions. Allow to dry.

2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.3. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 600 to 1,500 psi at 6 to 12

inches. Allow to dry.

I. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.

J. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to

make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPIArchitectural Painting Specification Manual".

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior toapplying next coat.

E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior tofinishing.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.


END OF SECTION


Interior Painting 09 9123 - 1 of 5

SECTION 09 9123INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints.

C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwiseindicated.1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied

primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating

parts of equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items.6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.7. Floors, unless specifically indicated.8. Glass.9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits, unless specified in other Sections.


A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.

B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.

C. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Color coding scheme for items to bepainted under this section.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Color coding scheme for items to be paintedunder this section.


A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications 2016.

B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 2005 (Reapproved2017).

C. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and DecoratorsAssociation Current Edition.

D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current Edition.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).

F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007.



G. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g.

"alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of substitutions

proposed.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finishwas used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaninginstructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of eachcolor and finish used.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where

directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified withminimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer .


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructionsfor mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature rangesrequired by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing ofsubstrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply materials when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required otherwiseby manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters Institute

Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPIcategories, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformlydispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable ofdrying or curing free of streaks or sags.

3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing andfield experience.

4. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shadelighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

5. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a singleproduction run.

6. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.

C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later byArchitect from the manufacturer's full line.

D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling

they are mounted on/under.3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to

the color coding scheme indicated.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Paint I-OP - Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board,concrete, concrete masonry units, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, and aluminum .1. Two top coats and one coat primer.2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138, 139, 140, or 141.3. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces, or matchadjacent surface sheen.

b. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.c. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by

occupants, including door frames and railings.4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.

B. Paint I-OP-MD-WC - Medium Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete,concrete masonry units, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer oftop coats.1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer; MPI #3.2. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler; MPI #4.



3. Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #76.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials,and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any conditionthat may potentially effect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best resultfor the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects.

D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

F. Concrete:1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer'swritten instructions.

2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1,500 to 4,000 psi at 6 to 12inches. Allow to dry.

3. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.4. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 13.

G. Masonry:1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's writteninstructions. Allow to dry.

2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.3. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 600 to 1,500 psi at 6 to 12

inches. Allow to dry.

H. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

I. Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smoothand flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

J. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to

make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.



Re-prime entire shop-primed item.3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

K. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitchstreaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sandbetween coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPIArchitectural Painting Specification Manual".

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.

E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coatsas necessary for complete hide.

F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior toapplying next coat.

H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior tofinishing.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.


END OF SECTION

HVAC RenovationGresham Smith Project No. 42426.30May 2, 2021

MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 23 0000 – Page 1 of 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Special Conditions of this Contract form a part of this Division of Specification.

B. This section forms a part of all sections under, Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.

C. Requirements herein augment or clarify articles specified under aforementioned General and Special Conditions.

1.2 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Before submitting bid, Contractor shall examine the premises and satisfy himself as to the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate or what will affect the work under this Contract. Contractor shall report to the Architect/Engineer any condition which might prevent installation of equipment or systems in the manner intended. No allowance will be made subsequently in this connection in behalf of this Contractor for error or negligence on his part.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Latest effective publications of applicable codes and ordinances of local governing agencies and of the following standards, codes, etc., as they apply, form part of these specifications as if were written fully herein. The publication date is the publication in effect as of the bid date, except when a specific publication date is listed. These will be referred to throughout in abbreviated form.

1. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC)2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)3. Factory Mutual Engineering Association (FM)4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)6. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE)8. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)11. Health Care Facilities Handbook




12. American Welding Society (AWS)13. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS)14. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA)15. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)16. American Gas Association (AGA)17. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)18. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)19. Virginia Mechanical Code20. Virginia Plumbing Code

1.4 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, FEES AND NOTICES

A. Unless modified by the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, work is to be executed and inspected in accordance with governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations applicable to particular class of work, and fees in connection therewith are to be paid by this Contractor.

B. This Contractor is to arrange for project inspection, paying charges pertaining hereto. He shall give the proper authority requisite notice relating to work under his charge, shall afford Architect/Engineer and authorized inspectors every facility for inspection and shall be responsible for violations of law. Upon completion of work, he shall have work inspected, if required, obtaining certificate of inspection and approval from inspecting agency, and shall deliver such certificate to Architect/Engineer.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work required for Division 22 Plumbing, Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning shall include labor, materials, equipment, appurtenances, and services to provide first class working systems, tested and ready for operation. Installation shall conform to the drawings and specifications, incorporating the best standards of workmanship. Materials shall be new and of good quality, and labor shall be performed by skilled mechanics under the direction of a competent superintendent.

1.6 ALTERNATES

1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The implied and stated intent of the drawings and specifications is to establish minimum acceptable quality standards for materials, equipment and workmanship, and to provide operable mechanical systems complete in every respect.




B. Apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.

C. Contractor shall examine and consult drawings and specifications of other trades to better familiarize himself with the character of construction and include in his bid work of his trade shown or reasonably inferred. He shall consult the drawings and specifications of other trades in installing his work.

D. This Contractor shall be thoroughly familiar with specified products relating to his work and shall submit written objections prior to bid if he objects to the proposed use of any product.

E. Should structural difficulties prevent the installation of piping, ductwork, fixtures, or equipment at the points shown on the drawings, necessary deviations therefrom, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, will be permitted and shall be made without additional cost. This Contractor shall work with other Contractors and arrange his work so as not to interfere with the work of other Contractors.

F. Drawings are diagrammatic, intending to show general arrangement and location of system components, with no attempt made to show every ell, tee, fitting, etc. Due to the small scale of the drawings, and to unforeseen job conditions, required offsets and fittings may not be shown but shall be provided at no change in Contract price. Ducts and pipes shall be run in spaces indicated as job conditions warrant, arranged for most convenient access for servicing, with due consideration given to swing joints and to other Contractor's work. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary, Contractor shall submit details of such departures and the reasons therefor as soon as practicable after award of contract to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Make no such departures without prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer.

G. Contractor shall maintain on site a current set of drawings and specifications.

H. In case of conflicting information on the drawings and/or in the specifications, the proper interpretation shall be made by the Architect/Engineer.

I. Disagreements occurring between trades covering various phases of the work shall be referred to General Contractor for decision.

J. Changes and additions to scope of the work under this contract shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and his written approval obtained before proceeding with the changed work.

1.8 WORDING

A. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences. Omission of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "shall be", "provide", "furnish", "a", "an", "the" is intentional. Omitted words or phrases shall be supplied by inference.




1.9 DEFINITIONS

A. "Provide": To furnish, erect, install, and connect up complete and ready for regular operation, particular work referred to, unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.

B. "Work": Labor and materials, or both, including apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items necessary or required to provide a complete installation.

C. "Piping": Pipe and fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps, drains, insulation, and items necessary or required in connection with or relating to such piping to provide a complete installation.

D. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring, within double partitions or above hung ceilings, in trenches, tunnels, or crawl spaces.

E. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.

F. "Indicated" or "Shown": As indicated or shown on drawings.

G. "Noted": As indicated on drawings and/or specified.

H. "Contract" or "this Contract" shall consist of documents listed in the Contractor Agreement and Supplemental Agreements, data or drawings which could reasonably be required to complete the work. This shall be considered as one instrument and referred to collectively as the "Contract Documents".

I. Whenever the words "as shown" or "indicated" are used in the description of any part of the work, it shall be understood to mean as shown on the contract drawings, unless another meaning is plainly indicated or noted.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples within thirty (30) days of award of contract and in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. All interdependent equipment, i.e., chillers, boilers, pumps and associated hydronic equipment, shall be submitted simultaneously. Pumps will not be reviewed or approved prior to approval of all interdependent equipment. Submittals are required for items provided under this specification. Review of submittals by the Architect/Engineer and associated action taken by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the contractor of requirements set forth by the contract documents.

B. Submittals shall clearly indicate all features, options, capacities, etc. to show compliance with the drawings and specifications.




C. The Contractor Shall:

1. Coordinate submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.2. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of deviations in the

submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.3. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with

Architect/Engineer approval.4. Make submittals promptly and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the

work of other contractors.5. Package inter-related submittals together and submit simultaneously. This is especially

important for pumps, chillers, boilers, air handlers and hydronic specialties.

D. Drawings prepared by the Contractor, for the Contractor's use, shall be submitted. Such drawings include, but are not limited to: duct fabrication and layout drawings, fire protection piping and layout drawings, equipment layout drawings, coordination drawings, and drawings of miscellaneous details. Such drawings shall be submitted for information purposes only.

E. Prepare Product Data as Follows:

1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.3. Show dimensions and clearances required.4. Show wiring diagrams, piping diagrams and controls.

F. Prepare manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows:

1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work.2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the

work.

G. Prepare office samples of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:

1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.

2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.

H. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and of any previous submissions.2. The project title and number.3. Contract or project identification.4. The names of:

a. Contractor.b. Supplier.c. Manufacturer.




5. Identification of the product, and specification section.6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.7. Relation to adjacent or critical features or materials.8. Applicable standards.9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.10. Identification of non-complying features and reason for the non-compliance. The reason

shall be specific in nature.11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.12. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of

products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.

I. Submittals of Mechanical and Plumbing Equipment requiring maintenance shall be accompanied by three (3) sets of the manufacturers' standard Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Parts Lists. A bound manual with an index and identification tabs shall be prepared for each set. These are to be retained by Contractor, until completion of job, at which time they will be assembled and turned over to the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Contractor's Options:

1. For Products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard.

2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named, which complies with the specifications.

3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal", or where a particular product is indicated as the basis of design, Contractor must submit a request for substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named.

B. Substitutions:

1. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:

a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified.b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution.c. Effect on the construction schedule.d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified.e. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials.

2. Architect/Engineer shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution.




3. If this contractor should elect to propose any equipment that has different physical or electrical characteristics, etc. when compared to the basis of design equipment, this contractor is responsible for coordinating these changes with the other trades prior to ordering of equipment. If there should be any additional work incurred by the other trades as a result of this contractor’s equipment selection, all costs associated with the additional work shall be borne by this contractor.

C. Contractor's Representation:

1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified.

b. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.

c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, and make such other changes as may be required to make the work complete.

d. Waives claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent.

D. Architect/Engineer will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.

1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Architect/Engineer.

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory steps or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

2. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect/Engineer for further instructions.

3. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURING STANDARDS

A. Materials shall be new and designed and/or constructed for their intended use and application. Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of installation or test shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design. All items of the same type and rating shall be identical.

2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Except as otherwise detailed or specified, all interconnecting power wiring required to operate electrical devices and equipment furnished in this Division will be provided under Division 26 Electrical.

B. All controllers, motors, and starters, etc. shall be as specified under this Division of the specifications and furnished with equipment under this Division. If there is no specification for motors and controllers under this Division, then motors and controllers shall be as defined under the electrical provisions of the specifications. Starters and controllers that are not mounted on the equipment shall be turned over to the Electrical Contractor for installation.

C. Disconnect switches shall be provided under Division 26 Electrical unless specified in Division 22 Plumbing and/or Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning as integral with equipment.

D. Requirements for electrical apparatus, devices, controls, etc. furnished in this Division shall conform to Division 26 Electrical if not established under this Division.

E. Control and interlock, wiring and conduit required for electrical devices and equipment furnished in this Division will be provided under this Division.

2.3 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS

A. All motors furnished as a part of the work of this Division, unless otherwise specified, shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the equipment served and shall be mounted and aligned so as to run free and true.

B. All motors shall be provided with a terminal box of adequate size to accommodate the required conduit and wiring. Wire nuts and lugs will be provided under Division 26 Electrical.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK

A. The schedule of the mechanical work shall be arranged to suit the progress of work by the other trades and shall in no way retard progress of construction of the building.

B. Work under this Division shall proceed in advance of the work of others whenever possible, eliminating cutting and patching. When such procedure is impossible, cutting and patching shall be done in an approved manner. Cutting shall not endanger structural function of the building. Patching shall match existing work. Actual work of cutting and patching of existing surfaces shall be performed by the subcontractor who originally prepared these surfaces, e.g., cutting and patching of masonry wall will be performed by the masonry subcontractor. Cutting shall be carefully done and damage to building, piping, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of trade involved. Each Contractor shall furnish sketches showing locations and sizes of all openings, chases, etc. required for installation of his work.

C. Contractor shall furnish and locate sleeves and inserts required before floors and walls are built. Contractor shall coordinate all drilling required for installation of his hangers.

D. Exposed piping and ductwork shall be completely installed and ready for painting by General Contractor. Any incorrect and added work installed by Mechanical Contractor after the General Contractor has painted the areas shall be painted at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Contractor must cooperate completely with contractors providing equipment under other Divisions of the specifications. This is particularly important in accordance with Division 26 Electrical.

F. Space Priority:

1. Ensure equitable use of available space for materials and equipment installed above ceilings. Allocate space in the order of priority as listed below. Items are listed in the order of priority, with items of equal importance listed under a single priority number.

a. Gravity flow piping systems.b. Vent piping systems.c. Ceiling recessed lighting fixtures.d. Concealed air terminal units, fans.e. Air duct systems.f. Sprinkler systems piping.g. Forced flow piping systems.h. Electrical conduit, wiring, control wiring.




2. Order of priority does not dictate installation sequence. Installation sequence shall be as mutually agreed by all affected trades.

3. Change in order of priority is permissible by mutual agreement of all affected trades.4. The work of a particular trade shall not infringe upon the allocated space of another trade

without permission of the Contractor for the affected trade.5. The work of a particular trade shall not obstruct access for installation, operation and

maintenance of the work, materials and equipment of another trade.

G. Installation

1. Inaccessible Equipment:

a. Where the end user determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the end user.

b. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders 2’-0” greater than the ceiling height, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork. Equipment above ceilings shall be within 12” of top of ceiling.

3.2 BUILDING OPENINGS FOR ADMISSION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall ascertain from his examination of the architectural and structural drawings whether any special temporary openings in the building for the admission of apparatus furnished under this Contract will be necessary, and he shall notify the Architect/Engineer accordingly. Failure to give this notification in sufficient time for Architect/Engineer to arrange for same during construction shall not incur any additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS

A. Work in existing buildings must be scheduled during times when the buildings are occupied. Systems serving the existing building(s) must be kept operative at all times. Temporary system shutdown shall be approved by the Owner prior to actual shutdown.

B. Fixtures, equipment, piping, etc. that are removed and not indicated "to be reused" are to become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the building site.

C. Demolition drawings indicate approximate location, size and quantity of piping: Minor variations in location of piping exposed by removal of walls or openings in walls and required to maintain an operating system shall be relocated as directed at no additional expense to the Owner. Piping not required to maintain an operating system shall be removed. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the piping work involved in cutting required for all trades.




D. Cutting and patching will be performed by the General Contractor. Contractor shall furnish sketches showing locations, and sizes of openings, chases, etc. required for installation of his work.

3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Work, fixtures, equipment, and materials shall be protected at all times. The Contractor shall make good damage caused, whether directly or indirectly, by the workmen. Work shall be properly protected to prevent destruction or damage. Pipe and ductwork openings shall be closed with caps and plugs or plastic sheeting during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical injury.

B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's

instructions.

C. Exterior Storage:

1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

E. Protection After Installation:

1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.

3.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.




2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the premises free of shipping cartons, crates, material scrap, pipe cuttings, etc. related to his work. Floors shall be protected with leakproof pans where pipe cutting or threading operations are in progress.

B. Prime coated equipment, insulation, piping, and pipe covering shall be left dust-free where painting is not required. Thorough cleaning shall be done where painting is required.

C. Factory finished painted equipment shall be washed with mild soap and water and left in first class condition, entirely free of stains or streaks. Abrasive materials shall not be used.

D. Plumbing fixtures shall be cleaned with mild soap and water containing a disinfecting agent. Trim handles shall be set at same angle and trim shall be polished. Aerators shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled after piping has been cleaned and disinfected. Pop-up wastes shall be checked for proper operation.

E. Sumps, pits, trenches, manholes, catch basins, and floor drains shall be cleaned and left free of foreign material.

3.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Except as otherwise detailed or specified, all electrical devices, apparatus, etc., furnished in this Division, but which are not integral with the equipment served, will be installed under Division 26 Electrical.

3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Contractor shall connect equipment and/or fixtures requiring piping or plumbing connections.

B. Equipment not particularly specified in this Division of the specification is either specified under other Divisions of these specifications, or furnished by the Owner: Plumbing work in connection therewith is to be included under this Division unless otherwise indicated. Contractor shall carefully examine drawings and other Divisions of the specifications and shall provide roughing-in, including traps, to connect this equipment to the piping or plumbing system, and leave ready for use and operation, with stops, supplies, etc.




C. Connections to equipment shall be in accordance with shop drawings to be furnished by the equipment supplier.

3.9 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Provide material and labor required to perform start-up of equipment and system prior to beginning of test, adjust and balance procedures.

B. Plumbing, air conditioning, heating, and ventilating system shall be operated separately, or in conjunction with the other, for a sufficient period of time to demonstrate to satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer the ability of the system to meet capacity and performance requirements while maintaining design conditions, in accordance with the true intent and purpose of these specifications. Contractor shall set and adjust mechanical and control equipment, appurtenances and other items as necessary to properly balance phases of the system and shall have the system operating and maintaining design temperature, humidity, and air circulation throughout the building. Contractor shall provide additional fan sheaves or pump impellers required to obtain design flow rates.1.

C. Prior to start of balancing, this Contractor shall review balancing test procedures with the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall provide information and assistance as required in cooperation with the test, adjust and balance service.

D. Start-up procedures shall be as follows:

1. Bearings:

a. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.b. Verify alignment.c. Replace defective bearings, and those which run rough or noisy.d. Lubricate as necessary, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Drives:

a. Adjust tension in V-belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed.

b. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.c. Clean, remove foreign materials before starting operation.

3. Motors:

a. Check motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.b. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to

equipment malfunction.c. Verify rotation and direction of driven equipment is in accordance with design.




4. Valves:

a. Inspect both hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems.b. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate

without galling.c. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged

complete.d. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.e. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.

5. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material, and are properly positioned for intended service.

6. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation. Replace flange gaskets which show any sign of leakage after tightening.

7. Inspect screwed and welded joints for leakage. Promptly remake joints which appears to be faulty, do not wait for rust to form. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints.

8. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valve seats and headers in fluid systems, to assure being free of foreign materials.

9. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced surfaces.10. Set and calibrate draft gauges of air filters and other equipment.11. Inspect fan wheels for rotation, clearance and balance. Provide factory-authorized

personnel for adjustment when needed.12. Check electrical control circuit to assure that operation complies with specifications and

requirements to provide desired performance.13. Inspect pressure gauges and thermometers for calibration.14. Replace items which are defaced, broken, or which read incorrectly.15. Repair damaged insulation.16. Vent gases trapped in hydronic or steam systems.17. Verify that liquids are drained from gas or air systems.

E. Provide such periodic continuing adjustment services as necessary to insure proper functioning of mechanical systems after occupancy of the project, and for a period of one year after date of substantial completion.

3.10 COMPLETION OF WORK

A. Air Filters:

1. Contractor to replace all air filtration media after completion of construction and prior to occupancy.




B. Plumbing Fixture Caulking:

1. Where irregular walls cause gaps between fixture and wall, Contractor shall fill voids by caulking around fixture.

C. Operating Instructions:

1. Printed instructions, installed in suitable frame with glass front which covers operating and maintenance of each major item of equipment, shall be posted at locations designated by Architect/Engineer. Bound manuals for equipment operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists shall be turned over to the Owner. Contractor shall carefully instruct Owner's operation man during adjustment and testing period of equipment for each length of time as may be necessary to thoroughly familiarize him with the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment.

D. Record Drawings:

1. During construction, the Contractor shall keep an accurate record of deviations between the work as shown on the contract drawings and that which is actually installed. He shall secure a set of blue line prints of the plumbing and mechanical drawings for this purpose, and note changes thereon in red ink, in a neat and accurate manner, thus making a complete record of all changes and revisions in the original design which exist in the completed work. The cost of furnishing above prints and preparing these record drawings shall be included in the contract price by the Mechanical Contractor. When revisions have been shown on these prints to indicate the work as installed, the prints shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer, before final payment.

E. Valve and Damper Placement Indication:

1. Where valves and dampers are located above suspended ceilings, an indication device (as approved by the Architect/Engineer) shall be located in the tile below the device.

F. PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

1. New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

2. Factory Painting Systems: Manufacturer’s standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.




The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer’s standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3. Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces (Shop or Field Painting): Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces (2 coats); except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.Two finish coats are required. Apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

3.11 GUARANTEE OF WORK

A. Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the contract that work installed is free from defects in workmanship and/or materials, and that the apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified. If, during the period of one year or as otherwise specified from date of certificate of completion, defects in workmanship, material or performance appear, he will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from Architect/Engineer. In default thereof, the Owner may have such work done and charge cost to Contractor. Equipment guarantees from date of "start-up" or "delivery" will not be recognized.

B. Comply, also, with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions and the applicable Sections of Division 01 General Requirements.

C. This Contractor shall service the installation for one year from date of substantial completion. This shall include emergency service and adjustment, with the exception of the oiling of motors and cleaning of filters and screens.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Bronze ball valves.2. Ductile iron, single-flange butterfly valves.3. High-performance butterfly valves.4. Bronze swing check valves.5. Iron swing check valves.6. Iron swing check valves with closure control.7. Chainwheels.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene tercopolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

D. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

I. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.




2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece with threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem

designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing.e. Body Material: Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C844.f. Ends: Threaded or Solder.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Bronze.i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full.

2.3 DUCTILE IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.b. NPS 12 and Smaller CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. NPS 14 and Larger CWP Rating: 150 psig.d. Body Design: Full lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, ductile iron.f. Seat: EPDM.g. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.h. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. SWP Rating: 125 psig.




d. Body Design: Y-pattern Horizontal flow.e. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.f. Ends: Threaded or Solder.g. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

2.5 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. SWP Rating: 125 psig.d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.f. Ends: Flanged.g. Trim: Bronze.h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.f. Ends: Flanged.g. Trim: Bronze.h. Gasket: Asbestos free.i. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Weight-Closure Control:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. SWP Rating: 125 psig.d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.




f. Ends: Flanged.g. Trim: Bronze.h. Gasket: Asbestos free.i. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and weight.

2.7 CHAINWHEELS

A. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.2. Attachment: For connection to butterfly valve stems.3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for

valve. Include zinc coating.4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.




C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Butterfly valves may be installed with stem horizontal to allow support for the disc and the cleaning action of the disc.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly and gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.2. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.




3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim.4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and weight.

3.6 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with stainless-steel trim.3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.


1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and weight.5. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125.

3.7 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim.3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.





1. Iron Valves: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,

aluminum-bronze disc.3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and weight.5. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125.

END OF SECTION


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Section 23 0529 - Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.5. Equipment supports.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. No submittals are required for this Section.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psigminimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.




2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.




D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

K. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.




3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.




3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing, NPS 2 and larger.




I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.




2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): Shall not be permitted to support piping and other equipment from open web steel joist. Hangers on open web steel joists shall load the joist chords concentrically. Eccentric hangers such as beam flange clamps, C-clamps, etc. are not permitted on open web steel joists. Refer to structural drawings for allowable support details and specifications.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe greater than 2 inches.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.




P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

END OF SECTION


VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads.2. Isolation mounts.3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.5. Housed spring mounts.6. Elastomeric hangers.7. Spring hangers.8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.9. Pipe riser resilient supports.10. Resilient pipe guides.11. Pump bases not specified by schedules.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.2. Building Classification Category: II.3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.


A. Product Data:

1. Spring Isolators2. Spring Hangers


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Field quality-control test reports.





A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

C. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.




6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

E. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.



deformation or failure.

F. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down

before contacting a resilient collar.

G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

H. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.




I. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

J. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified.




B. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

C. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c.3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.




D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.4 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment: AHU.

1. Equipment Location: Mezzanine.2. Isolator Type: Free standing steel spring.3. Minimum Deflection: 0.75 inches.

B. Supported or Suspended Equipment H&V.

1. Equipment Location: Tug Bay.2. Isolator Type: Free standing steel spring, isolation hanger.3. Minimum Deflection: 0.75 inches.

C. Supported or Suspended Equipment: CT.

1. Equipment Location Roof well.2. Isolator Type: Restrained spring isolator.3. Minimum Deflection: 0.75 inches.

END OF SECTION




VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 7

Equipment Location

Horsepower Grade Supported Slab Up to 20 Ft. Floor Span 20 – 30 Ft. Floor Span 30 – 40 Ft. Floor Spanand other Min. Min. Min. Min.

Equipment Equipment (Shaft Power, kW Base Isolator Deflection Base Isolator Deflection Base Isolator Deflection Base Isolator Deflection ReferenceType Category and Other) RPM Type Type In. Type Type In. Type Type In. Type Type In. NotesRefrigeration Reciprocating All All 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 3 2.50 -Machines Centrifugal All All 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 -and Chillers Open Centrifugal All All 7 1 0.25 7 3 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 - Absorption All All 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 -Air Tank-Mounted up to 10 All 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 -Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

15 and over All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 -

and Vacuum Base-Mounted All All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 -Pumps Large Reciprocating All All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 6Pumps Close Coupled up to 7.5 All 5/6 * 1 0.25 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 10 and over All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 5. 7 In Line 5 to 25 All 4 2 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 - 30 and over All 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 2.50 2. 5 End Suction up to 40 All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 50 to 125 All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 5. 7 150 and over All 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 5. 7 Split Case up to 40 All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 50 to 125 All 7 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 5. 7 150 and over All 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 5. 7Cooling Centrifugal up to 300 4 1 0.25 4 3 3.50 4 3 3.50 4 3 3.50 1. 3Towers 301 to 500 4 1 0.25 4 3 2.50 4 3 2.50 4 3 2.50 1 All 500 and over 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 3 0.75 4 3 1.75 1





Propeller up to 300 4 1 0.25 4 3 3.50 4 3 3.50 4 3 3.50 1. 3 301 to 500 4 1 0.25 4 3 2.50 4 3 2.50 4 3 2.50 1 All 500 and over 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 3 0.75 4 3 1.75 1Boilers All All All 4 1 0.25 5/6 * 3 0.75 5/6 * 3 1.75 5/6 * 3 2.50 1Axial up to 22 " Ø All All 4 1 0.25 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 7 2 0.75 1. 3Flow 24" Ø & over up to 2" up to 300 5/6 2 2.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 1, 3, 4Fans static pressure 301 to 500 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 7 2 2.50 1and 501 and over 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 1.75 5/6 2 1.75 5/6 2 1.75 1Fan 2.1" up to 300 7 2 2.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 1, 3, 4Heads static pressure 301 to 500 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 7 2 2.50 1, 4 and over 501 and over 7 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 1, 4Centrifugal up to 22" Ø All All 5/6 1 0.25 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 3, 4Fans 24" Ø & over up to 40 up to 300 5/6 2 2.50 5/6 2 3.50 5/6 2 3.50 5/6 2 3.50 3 301 to 500 5/6 2 1.75 5/6 2 1.75 5/6 2 2.50 5/6 2 2.50 3 501 and over 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 0.75 5/6 2 1.75 3 50 and over up to 300 7 2 2.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 3, 4 301 to 500 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 7 2 2.50 3, 4 501 and over 7 2 1.00 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 3, 4Propeller Wall mounted All All 4 1 0.25 4 1 0.25 4 1 0.25 4 1 0.25 1Fans Roof exhauster All All 4 1 0.25 4 1 0.25 5/6 * 3 1.75 8 3 1.75 1Heat Pumps All All All 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 4/8 2 1.75 -

Condensing Units All All All 4 1 0.25 4 3 0.75 4 3 1.75 4/8 3 1.75 -AH, AC and All up to 10 All 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 4 2 0.75 -H & V Units 15 and over up to 300 4 2 0.75 4 2 3.50 4 2 3.50 7 + 2 3.50 1, 4 up to 4" 301 to 500 4 2 0.75 4 2 2.50 4 2 2.50 4 2 2.50 4 static pressure 501 and over 4 2 0.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 4 2 1.75 4 15 and over up to 300 5/6 2 0.75 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 7 2 3.50 1, 3, 4 4" static 301 to 500 5/6 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 7 2 2.50 1, 4 pressure and over 501 and over 5/6 2 0.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 1.75 7 2 2.50 1, 4





Packaged All All All 4/8 1 0.25 8 2 0.75 8 2 1.75 8 2 2.50 8Rooftop Equipment

Products Meeting Selection CriteriaType 1 - Fiber Glass Isolation Pads, Fiber Glass Isolation Mounts, Elastomer Isolation Pads, Machinery Mounts, Vibration Isolation Mounts, Isolation HangerType 2 - Free-standing Steel Spring, Isolation HangerType 3 - Restrained Spring IsolatorType 4 - No Base RequiredType 5 - Structural Rail BaseType 6 - Integral Structural Beam BaseType 7 - Concrete Inertia BaseType 8 - Roof Curb Rail

Notes:1. Provide Type 5 or 6 base if required to support equipment properly.2. Provide Type 5, 6 or 7 base if required to stabilize supported equipment.3. Isolator natural frequency to be 40% of the lowest equipment operating speed.4. Provide HSR thrust restraints for air moving equipment operating at 2.1 in. static pressure and above.5. Provide 12 in. thick Type 7 inertia base for 75 HP and over pumps.6. Provide Type 7 inertia base weighing a minimum of 10 times the maximum equipment unbalanced forces. * Reference notes do not apply.7. Provide Type 7 inertia base large enough to provide elbow support. + Reference note #1 does not apply.8. If RTU weight causes additional roof deflection >0.25", stiffen roof structure or relocate RTU so additional deflection is <0.25". RTUs over noise-sensitive areas may require additional acoustical treatment to reduce airborne noise below.


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Duct labels.5. Valve tags.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL

A. No submittals are required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.3. Background Color: Black.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.




C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Indicate equipment identification tag as shown on Construction Documents. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.




2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.




1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green.b. Letter Color: White.




2. Condenser-Water Piping:


3. Heating Water Piping:


4. Condensate Piping:

a. Background Color: Greenb. Letter Color: White

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Duct Label: Provide stenciled labels showing service and flow direction. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1-1/4 inch in height with a minimum 3 inch in height color background. Color background shall be as indicated below and as required by ASME A13.1.

B. Install duct labels on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue with white lettering: For supply and outside air ducts.2. Yellow with black lettering: For exhaust ducts.3. Green with white lettering: For relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Chilled Water: 2 inches, round.




b. Condenser Water: 2 inches, round.c. Refrigerant: 2 inches, round.d. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.e. Gas: 2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Chilled Water: Green.b. Condenser Water: Green.c. Refrigerant: Green.d. Hot Water: Green.e. Gas: Yellow.

3. Letter Color:

a. Chilled Water: White.b. Condenser Water: White.c. Refrigerant: White.d. Hot Water: White.e. Gas: Black.

END OF SECTION


DUCT INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.7. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.8. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.


A. Product Data: For each type of insulation indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Field quality-control reports.


DUCT INSULATION



A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. All duct coverings and linings (including adhesives) are required to not flame, glow, smolder or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C411 at their rated temperatures (not less than 250oF).

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


DUCT INSULATION


2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.


DUCT INSULATION


2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.2. Color: White.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.3. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with stucco-embossed aluminum-foil facing.


DUCT INSULATION


2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 6 mils.3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 500 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 5 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.


DUCT INSULATION


B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.


DUCT INSULATION


5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation of all materials shall comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

C. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.


DUCT INSULATION


H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.


DUCT INSULATION


3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers as specified. Intumescent firestopping materials may only be used where fire dampers are not required. Intumescent firestopping materials may not be used for fire damper installations unless required by the fire damper manufacturer’s installation instructions.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.


DUCT INSULATION


2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Intumescent firestopping materials may only be used where fire dampers are not required. Intumescent firestopping materials may not be used for fire damper installations unless required by the fire damper manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with insulation pins.

1. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

2. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

3. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.


DUCT INSULATION


4. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

5. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with insulation pins.

1. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

2. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

3. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.


DUCT INSULATION


4. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Division 07.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.


DUCT INSULATION


B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.7. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.8. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.5. Flexible connectors.6. Vibration-control devices.7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.


DUCT INSULATION


3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

G. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

H. Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Minimum R-value = 6 hr* ft2*f/Btu. (out of package / uncompressed)

3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.


DUCT INSULATION


D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick.

END OF SECTION


HVAC PIPING INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping.2. Chilled-water and brine piping.3. Heating hot-water piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of insulation indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at hydronic piping specialties.6. Detail removable insulation at steam piping specialties.7. Detail application of field-applied jackets.8. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Calcium Silicate:

1. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

2. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 1290, Type I.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.




2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.4. Color: White or gray.




B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.




C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.2. Color: White.3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.3. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.5. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.c. Tee covers.d. Flange and union covers.e. End caps.f. Beveled collars.g. Valve covers.h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with stucco-embossed aluminum-foil facing.




2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 6 mils.3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 500 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 5 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.




2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation of all materials shall comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.




H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Inserts not required on piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.




P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

Q. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.




E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers as specified.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Hydronic Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using blanket insulation under PVC ell covers having the same R-value as adjacent pipe insulation. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.




6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.




B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.




C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.




3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: ½ inch thick.

B. Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or Pipe Insulation Wicking System: 1-1/2 inch

C. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inch for piping less than 2” diameter and 2 inch for piping 2” diameter and larger.

D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.

E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 3 inches thick.2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:





C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

E. Water Piping:


3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



C. Piping, Concealed and Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick.

END OF SECTION


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.


A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Schematic flow diagrams.2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.3. Details of control panel faces.4. Damper schedule.5. Valve schedule.6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control

diagrams.7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.


A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

B. Software and firmware operational documentation.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Multi-core processor, 2.6 GHz.3. Random-Access Memory: 4 GB.4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 512-MB video memory, with

TV out.5. Monitor: 19 inches, LCD color.6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.7. Hard-Disk Drive: 250 GB.8. DVD-ROM Read/Write Drive. 9. Mouse: Three button, optical.10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.11. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional with high-speed Internet access.

B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.




b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals.4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.




F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.




2.5 TIME CLOCKS

A. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.

B. Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs each with up to 100 on-off operations; 1-second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual override; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; system fault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC.

2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2-1/2 inches.6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.c. Thermometer: Exposed.d. Color: White.e. Orientation: Vertical.

7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.




3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.

4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.

5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.

6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.c. Thermometer: Exposed.d. Color: White.e. Orientation: Vertical.

7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.a.

2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.c. Thermometer: Concealed.d. Color: White.e. Orientation: Vertical.

5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate.

6. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F.

7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg.




d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

F. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.3. Thermometer: Concealed.4. Color: White.5. Orientation: Vertical.

2.7 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.




H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.8 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F; with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 50 and 100 ppm.

B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.

C. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting.

2.9 THERMOSTATS

A. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.5. Short-cycle protection.6. Programming based on every day of week.7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.8. Battery replacement without program loss.9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.b. Actual room temperature.c. Programmed temperature.d. Programmed time.e. Duration of timed override.f. Day of week.g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

B. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.




C. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.

2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

D. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument.5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by

application.6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly

is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

E. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:

1. Reset: Manual.2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control

panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.

F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.3. Thermometer: Exposed.4. Color: White.5. Orientation: Vertical.

G. Room thermostat accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base

in public spaces.3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob.




H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

I. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

J. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

K. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

L. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.

2.10 HUMIDISTATS

A. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.

2.11 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.




4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators.6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

2.12 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.




a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.

4. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:

a. Two Position: Line size.b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure

drop, whichever is more.c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value

specified above.

5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.

C. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

1. Body Style: Wafer.2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

D. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff

head.3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

E. Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax-filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial.




2.13 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable

rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.14 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring is specified in section regarding communications horizontal cabling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.2. Public areas.3. Where indicated.

C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23.

D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.




E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23.

F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23.

G. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23.

H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23.

I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27.

3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26.

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26.

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.3. Install concealed cable in raceway where installed within permanent construction such as

walls or hard ceilings. Cabling above lay-in ceilings does not require a raceway if a plenum rated jacket is provided and cables are independently supported from ceiling grid.

4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables.

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.




B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation

with compatible signal generator.4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required.5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions.6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations.4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators.6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.9. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to section regarding demonstration and training.

END OF SECTION


VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFDs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CPT: Control power transformer.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

E. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. VFD: Variable-frequency motor controller.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated.

1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General Requirements for VFDs:

1. VFDs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508A .

B. Application: Constant torque and variable torque.

C. VFD Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1 motors.2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range or 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

F. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFD input voltage rating.2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent.3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating.4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed

condition.6. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.7. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).8. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.9. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2.10. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds.11. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.12. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 10 percent.




13. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.14. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 16 or 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFD, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips.4. Inverter overcurrent trips.5. VFD and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.8. Loss-of-phase protection.9. Reverse-phase protection.10. Short-circuit protection.

K. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

L. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

M. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.




N. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

O. Integral Input Disconnecting Means with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFD input current rating, whichever is larger.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on.2. Run.3. Overvoltage.4. Line fault.5. Overcurrent.6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least one level of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFD door and connected to display VFD parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz).2. Motor speed (rpm).3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).4. Motor current (amperes).5. Motor torque (percent).6. Fault or alarming status (code).7. PID feedback signal (percent).




8. DC-link voltage (V dc).9. Set point frequency (Hz).10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc.b. 4- to 20-mA dc.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) (0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc:

a. Output frequency (Hz).b. Output current (load).c. DC-link voltage (V dc).d. Motor torque (percent).e. Motor speed (rpm).f. Set point frequency (Hz).

2.3 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Manually transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFD. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor, and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

C. Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC -rated contactor.2. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactor.3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit

safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.




D. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFD as "Plenum Rated."

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFD enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons: Unguarded.2. Pilot Lights: Push to test.3. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with section regarding hangers and supports for electrical systems.

B. Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFD on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.




1. Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in section regarding roof accessories.2. Structural-steel channels are specified in section regarding hangers and supports for

electrical systems.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFD.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.

F. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system.

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification as specified.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate.3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.




C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit.4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed

Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges




F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs.

END OF SECTION


HYDRONIC PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following systems:

1. Hot-water heating piping.2. Chilled-water piping.3. Condenser-water piping.4. Makeup-water piping.5. Condensate-drain piping.6. Blowdown-drain piping.7. Air-vent piping.8. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.9. Copper tube and fittings.10. Steel pipe and fittings.11. Plastic pipe and fittings.12. Joining materials.13. Transition fittings.14. Dielectric fittings.15. Bypass chemical feeder.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe.2. Fittings.3. Joining materials.4. Bypass chemical feeder.5. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.6. Air control devices.7. Chemical treatment.8. Hydronic specialties.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.


HYDRONIC PIPING


3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall and floor and ceiling assemblies.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports:

1. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.




A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.


HYDRONIC PIPING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F.2. Chilled-Water Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F.3. Condenser-Water Piping: 100 psig at 150 deg F.4. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.5. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

F. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting.

Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.


HYDRONIC PIPING


D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.2. End Connections: Butt welding.3. Facings: Raised face.

G. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

2. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

H. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings:

1. Housing: Steel.2. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM.3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool.4. Minimum 300-psig working-pressure rating at 230 deg F.

I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.


HYDRONIC PIPING


1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.


HYDRONIC PIPING


2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

1. MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.


HYDRONIC PIPING


E. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545.c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.8 VALVES

A. Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves:

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors:

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.3. Plug: Resin.4. Seat: PTFE.5. End Connections: Threaded or socket.6. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.7. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.3. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.4. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.5. Seat: PTFE.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:

1. Body: Bronze or brass.2. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.


HYDRONIC PIPING


3. Seat: Brass.4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.5. Diaphragm: EPT.6. Low inlet-pressure check valve.7. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:

1. Body: Bronze or brass.2. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.3. Seat: Brass.4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.5. Diaphragm: EPT.6. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.7. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

1. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.2. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.3. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.4. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.5. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.6. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations.7. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.

2.9 AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.


HYDRONIC PIPING


7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

B. Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.

3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.

4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard.

C. In-Line Air Separators:

1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.

2.10 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.


HYDRONIC PIPING


C. Expansion fittings are specified in section regarding expansion fittings and loops for HVAC piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges

and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:


2. Polypropylene (PP-R), ASTM F2389, pipe and socket fusion, fusion outlet, or electrofusion fittings.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:


and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

E. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.

F. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:


and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.


HYDRONIC PIPING


3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

G. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:


H. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.

I. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints. PVC shall not be used in return air plenums.

J. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

K. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.


HYDRONIC PIPING


3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric or concentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to the section regarding general-duty valves for HVAC piping.

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.


HYDRONIC PIPING


R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified.

U. Identify piping as specified.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves as specified.

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals as specified.

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons as specified.

Y. Sleeves not required for core-drilled holes thru non fire rated floors and partitions.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in section regarding hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.2. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.


HYDRONIC PIPING


C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


HYDRONIC PIPING


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

3.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.


HYDRONIC PIPING


D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

E. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of

tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.

3.8 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections as specified.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.


HYDRONIC PIPING


B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

END OF SECTION


METAL DUCTS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Round ducts and fittings.3. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.4. Double-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.5. Sheet metal materials.6. Duct liner.7. Sealants and gaskets.8. Hangers and supports.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.


METAL DUCTS


10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1. Lighting fixtures.2. Air outlets and inlets.3. Speakers.4. Sprinklers.5. Access panels.6. Perimeter moldings.

B. Welding certificates.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.


METAL DUCTS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


METAL DUCTS


1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 304 stainless steel indicated by

manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inchesin diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inchesin width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.


METAL DUCTS


E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.4 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.

1. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide galvanneal (paintable) finish for all exposed ductwork.

2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inchesin Diameter: Flanged.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inchesin diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inchesin width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

4. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gaugesolid galvanized sheet steel.


METAL DUCTS


C. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg Fat 75 deg Fmean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

2.5 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.


METAL DUCTS


2.6 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

2. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inchesin diameter.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.


METAL DUCTS


5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inchesfrom corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inchestransversely; at 3 inchesfrom transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

1. Fan discharges.2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpmor where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between solid sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.


METAL DUCTS


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.


METAL DUCTS


F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.


METAL DUCTS


J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements as specified in air duct accessories for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

M. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. All external joints are to have secure watertight mechanical connections. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction.

B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather. Provide necessary supporting structures.

C. Single Wall:

1. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel.


METAL DUCTS


a. If duct outer surface is uninsulated, protect outer surface with suitable paint. Paint to match existing adjacent ductwork.

2. Where ducts have external insulation, provide weatherproof aluminum jacket. See Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

D. Double Wall:

1. Ductwork outer wall shall be Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

2. Provide interstitial insulation.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class A.6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A.7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class A.10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A.11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."


METAL DUCTS


B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors as specified.

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in

accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

1. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


METAL DUCTS


C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. If not protected and deemed dirty by A/E.

B. Use the following for existing duct clean as noted on the construction drawings.

C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with section regarding air duct accessories for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.


METAL DUCTS


F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in section regarding testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC.

END OF SECTION


COOLING TOWERS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Open-circuit, induced-draft, counterflow cooling towers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cooling tower support structure indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of support structure.2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


A. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Source quality-control reports.


D. Startup service reports.

E. Warranty.




COOLING TOWERS



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.2. All components of cooling tower.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS

A. Cooling tower designed to resist wind load of 30 lbf/sq. ft.

B. Casing and Frame:

1. Casing and Frame Material: Stainless steel.2. Frame Material Stainless steel.3. Fasteners: Stainless steel.4. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.5. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.

C. Collection Basin:

1. Material: Stainless steel.2. Strainer: Removable stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.3. Overflow and drain connections.4. Makeup water connection.5. Outlet Connection: ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange.6. Removable equalization flume plate between adjacent cells of multiple-cell towers.

D. Mechanically Operated, Collection Basin Water-Level Control: Manufacturer's standard adjustable, mechanical float assembly and valve.

E. Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve:

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.


COOLING TOWERS


2. Sensor: Solid-state controls with multiple electrode probes and relays factory wired to a terminal strip to provide control of water makeup valve and low- and high-level alarms.

3. Electrode Probes: Stainless steel.4. Water Stilling Chamber: Corrosion-resistant material.5. Solenoid Valve: Slow closing, controlled and powered through level controller in

response to water-level set point.6. Electrical Connection Requirements: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

F. Electric Basin Heater:

1. Stainless-Steel Electric Immersion Heaters: Installed in a threaded coupling on the side of the collection basin.

2. Heater Control Panel: Mounted on the side of each cooling tower cell.3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Magnetic contactors controlled by a temperature sensor/controller shall maintain

collection basin water-temperature set point. Water-level probe shall monitor cooling tower water level and de-energize the heater when the water reaches low-level set point.

5. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.6. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.7. Single-point, field-power connection to a fused disconnect switch and heater branch

circuiting complying with NFPA 70.8. Factory Wiring Method: Metal raceway for factory-installed wiring outside of

enclosures, except make connections to each electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit.

G. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for even distribution over heat-exchanger coil or fill throughout the flow range without the need for balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, nonclogging spray nozzles.

1. Pipe Material: PVC.2. Spray Nozzle Material: Plastic.3. Piping Supports: Corrosion-resistant hangers and supports to resist movement during

operation and shipment.

H. Fill:

1. Materials: PVC, resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. Minimum Thickness: 15 mils, before forming.3. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into

removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.4. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering-water temperatures up

through 120 deg F.


COOLING TOWERS


I. Drift Eliminator:

1. Material: PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to achieve

performance indicated.

J. Air-Intake Louvers:

1. Material: PVC.2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.3. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize air

resistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all modes of operation including operation with fans off.

K. Axial Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly.

1. Blade Material: Aluminum.2. Hub Material: Aluminum.3. Blade Pitch: Field adjustable.4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens, complying with

OSHA regulations.5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture-proof seals and

premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of 40,000 hours.

6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.

L. Belt Drive:

1. Service Factor: 1.5 based on motor nameplate horsepower.2. Sheaves: Fan and motor shafts shall have taper-lock sheaves fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials.

a. Belt: One-piece, multigrooved, solid-back belt.b. Belt Material: Oil resistant, nonstatic conducting, and constructed of neoprene

polyester cord.c. Belt-Drive Guard: Comply with OSHA regulations.

M. Fan Motor:

1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and temperature-rating requirements as specified and not indicated below.

2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed.3. Energy Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficient.


COOLING TOWERS


4. Service Factor: 1.15.5. Insulation: Class F.6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV, "Performance

Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase Motors."

7. Motor Location: Mounted outside of cooling tower casing and cooling tower discharge airstream.

8. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.

N. Fan Discharge Stack: Material shall match casing, manufacturer's standard design.

1. Stack Termination: Wire-mesh, galvanized-steel screens complying with OSHA regulations.

O. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set point in a

range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.

3. Provide switch for hardwired connection to fan motor electrical circuit.4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, shut down the fan.

P. Controls: Comply with requirements in Division 23.

Q. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

1. NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure with removable internally mount back plate.2. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare

wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.4. Microprocessor-based controller for automatic control of fan based on cooling tower

leaving-water temperature with control features to improve operating efficiency based on outdoor ambient wet-bulb temperature by using adaptive logic.

5. Fan motor sequencer for multiple-cell and two-speed applications with automatic lead stage rotation.

6. Collection basin level controller complying with requirements in "Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve" Paragraph.

7. Electric basin heaters with temperature control and low-water-level safety switch for each cell, complying with requirements in "Electric Basin Heater" Paragraph.

8. Vibration switch for each fan, complying with requirement in "Vibration Switch" Paragraph.

9. Oil-level switch for each fan with a gear drive, complying with requirement in "Gear-Drive, Oil-Level Switch" Paragraph.

10. Single-point, field-power connection to a fused disconnect switch.


COOLING TOWERS


a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to controls.b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection

for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with manual bypass and line reactors for each variable-speed motor indicated.

11. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway, except make connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit.

12. Visual indication of status and alarm for each motor.13. Visual indication of elapsed run time, graduated in hours for each motor.14. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and display the

following:

a. Operational status of each motor.b. Position of dampers.c. Cooling tower leaving-fluid temperature.d. Fan vibration alarm.e. Collection basin high- and low-water-level alarms.

R. Personnel Access Components:

1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components from both cooling tower end walls. Doors shall be operable from both sides of the door.

2. External Ladders with Safety Cages: Aluminum, galvanized- or stainless-steel, fixed ladders with ladder extensions to access external platforms and top of cooling tower from adjacent grade without the need for portable ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.

3. External Platforms with Handrails: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar grating at cooling tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and not accessible from grade.

4. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with kneerail and toeboard, around top of cooling tower to safeguard personnel while accessing components located on top of cooling tower. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23.

5. Internal Platforms: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar grating.

a. Spanning the collection basin from one end of cooling tower to the other and positioned to form a path between the access doors. Platform shall be elevated so that all parts are above the high water level of the collection basin.

b. Elevated internal platforms with handrails accessible from fixed vertical ladders to access the fan drive assembly when out of reach from collection basin platform.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."


COOLING TOWERS


B. Factory pressure test heat exchangers after fabrication and prove to be free of leaks.

2.3 ELECTRIC POWER MONITORING

A. Provide a power phase monitor on the incoming power supply to the equipment. The device shall prevent the equipment from operating during periods when the incoming power is unsuitable for proper operation. The power phase monitor shall provide protection against the following conditions:

1. Low voltage (brown-out)2. Phase rotation3. Loss of phase4. Phase imbalance

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices as specified.

1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch.

C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration isolators.

D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.


COOLING TOWERS


E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements as specified. Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or mechanical coupling at each connection.

G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements as specified. Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balancing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

H. Equalizer Piping: Piping requirements to match supply and return piping. Connect an equalizer pipe, full size of cooling tower connection, between tower cells. Connect to cooling tower with shutoff valve.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers."

C. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

a. Clean entire unit including basins.b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.


COOLING TOWERS


d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.e. Lubricate bearings.f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct

problems.g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.h. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for harmonic

vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal vibration.

i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup

water-level control and valve.k. Verify operation of basin heater and control.l. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or HVAC

air intakes. Recommend corrective action.m. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.

END OF SECTION


MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight.2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.c. Fan construction and accessories.d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.6. Filters with performance characteristics.





B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.4. Factory Finish for Steel and Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard

primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Minimum R-Value of 13.

2. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.c. Size: At least 10 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height

of 60 inches.

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors.b. Access Section: Doors.c. Damper Section: Doors.d. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.




D. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2. Formed sections.3. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet.4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

5. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

2.2 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil.

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

1. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

2. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction.3. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-edged flexible

duct connector.




4. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the

filling.3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

D. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Prelubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with a rated life of 120,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

2. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.1046-inch-thick, 3/4-inch diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

F. Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

G. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors as specified.

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26.5. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.




2.3 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with ARI 410.2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

2.4 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

B. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.2. Thickness: 1 inch.3. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 80.4. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 5.5. Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side,

hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

C. Filter Gage:

1. 3-1/2-inch diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.2. Vent valves.3. Black figures on white background.4. Front recalibration adjustment.5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.6. Range: 0- to 1.0-inch wg.7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch plastic

tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves.

2.5 DAMPERS

A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.




B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Division 23.

C. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.3. Operator Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors as specified.

b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators.10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.12. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.14. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.




D. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel-blade, aluminum dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium-plated steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

E. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing section.

F. Combination Filter and Mixing Section:

1. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch-thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway filters.

2. Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly shall mix air to prevent stratification, located immediately downstream of mixing box.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

2.7 ELECTRIC POWER MONITORING

A. Provide a power phase monitor on the incoming power supply to the equipment. The device shall prevent the equipment from operating during periods when the incoming power is unsuitable for proper operation. The power phase monitor shall provide protection against the following conditions:

1. Low voltage (brown-out)2. Phase rotation3. Loss of phase4. Phase imbalance




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations as specified.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.




E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements as specified. Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in section regarding air duct accessories."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks.

2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants.




6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain

minimum outdoor-air setting.9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.11. Install new, clean filters.12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Special Conditions of this Contract form a part of this Division of Specification.

B. This section forms a part of all sections under Division 26 Electrical Division 27 Communication.

C. Requirements herein augment or clarify articles specified under aforementioned General and Special Conditions.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS FOR BIDDERS

A. Before submitting bid, visit the site and examine all adjoining existing equipment and space conditions on which work is in any way dependent, for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of specifications and drawings. Report to the Engineer any condition which might prevent the installation of the equipment in the manner intended.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Latest effective publications of following standards, codes, etc., as they apply, form part of these specifications as if were written fully herein and constitute minimum requirements. Minimum requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing higher grade materials and workmanship than herein specified. The following will be referred to throughout in abbreviated forms.

1. National Electrical Code, (NFPA 70) (NEC)2. Standard Rules of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)3. Rules and Regulations of Local Electric Utility Company 4. Applicable Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)5. Applicable Standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)6. Applicable Local Codes7. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code8. Applicable Standards and Lists of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)9. Applicable Standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)10. International Building Code (IBC) 11. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)12. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)




1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all work required for this Division including all labor, materials, equipment, appurtenances and services to provide complete electrical systems as shown on the drawings and specified in this Division of the specifications. The word "Provide" shall mean "Furnish and Install Complete and Ready for Use". The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Interior and exterior electrical lighting system including fixtures, lamps, time switches, photoelectric cells, contactors and other control devices and equipment.

2. Power wiring system, including outlets, receptacles, switches, wire, conduit, junction boxes, panelboards, switchboards and new electric service.

3. Disconnect switches and power wiring up to and including motor connections for all equipment provided under other Divisions of this specification shall be included in this Division. Where manual motor control switches for single phase motors are indicated, they shall be provided and wired complete under this Division. Motor controllers and motor starters furnished under other Divisions shall be set in place and connected to source and load under this Division. In general, motors will be provided with the equipment they drive and are not part of this work under this Division, except that they shall be connected hereunder.

4. System of cables, conduits, cabinets and outlets for telephone, computer and other communication systems.

5.

B. The following work is not included in this Division:

1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment and all associated motors and magnetic motor starters.

2. Plumbing equipment except as specifically indicated.3. Control, interlock, and internal equipment wiring regardless of voltage.4. Cable, terminals, instrument wiring, and instruments for telephone, computer and other

communication systems unless specifically addressed by other sections of the specification.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general extent, character and arrangement of equipment, fixtures and conduit and wiring systems. If any departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary, submit details of such departures and the reasons therefore as soon as practicable after award of contract to the Engineer for approval. Make no such de-partures without prior written approval of the Engineer.




B. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to fully cover all work and materials for a complete, first-class electrical installation, and any devices such as pull boxes and disconnect switches, usually employed in this class of work, though not specifically mentioned or shown on the drawings or in this specification, but which may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as a part of his total work under this Division. Consult the specifications and drawings of all other trades and perform all electrical work required therein. Cooperate with all other contractors or subcontractors to furnish complete workable systems.

C. In case of conflicting information on the drawings and/or in the specifications, the proper interpretation shall be made by the Engineer.

D. Disagreements occurring between trades covering various phases of the work shall be referred to General Contractor for final decision.

E. Changes and additions to scope of the work under this contract shall be submitted to the Engineer and his written approval obtained before proceeding with the changed work.

F. During construction, the Electrical Subcontractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on the contract drawings and that which is actually installed. He shall secure a set of blue line prints of the electrical drawings for this purpose, and note changes thereon with red marks, in a neat and accurate manner, thus making a complete record of all changes and revisions in the original design which exist in the completed work. The cost of furnishing above prints and preparing these record drawings shall be borne by the subcontractor, and shall be included in the contract price. When all revisions have been shown on these prints to indicate the work as finally installed, the prints shall be delivered to the Engineer, before final payment.

1.6 PERMITS, INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. The right is reserved to inspect and test any portion of the installation/equipment during the progress of its installation. Test all wiring for continuity and grounds before connecting any fixtures or devices. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring #6 or larger. Test the entire system when the work is finally completed to insure that all portions are free from short circuits and grounds. Provide all equipment necessary to conduct the above tests.

B. Secure and pay for all required permits and inspections. Inspection certificates from local authorities having jurisdiction shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment.




1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples within thirty (30) days of award of contract and in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. All interdependent equipment, i.e. lighting fixtures and lighting controls shall be submitted simultaneously. Review of submittals by the Engineer and any associated action taken by the Engineer does not relieve the contractor of any requirements set forth by the contract documents. Submittals are required for the following items if and only if those items are specified herein.

1. Panelboards2. Circuit Breakers3. Surge Protection Device (SPD)4. Variable Frequency Drives

B. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and of any previous submissions.2. The project title and number.3. Contract or project identification.4. The names of:

a. Contractor.b. Supplier.c. Manufacturer.

5. Identification of the product, and specification section.6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.7. Relation to adjacent or critical features or materials.8. Applicable standards.9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.10. Identification of non-complying features and reason for the non-compliance. The reason

shall be specific in nature.11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.12. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of

products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.

C. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. For a period of 10 days after Contract date, Engineer will consider written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.




2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:

a. Comparison of the proposed substitution with that specified.b. Changes required elsewhere because of the substitution.c. Effect on the construction schedule.d. Cost comparison of the substitution and product specified.e. Availability of maintenance service, and replacement parts.

3. The Engineer shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution.4. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.

b. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.

c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, and make such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects.

d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent.

5. If this contractor should elect to propose any equipment that has different physical or electrical characteristics, etc. when compared to the basis of design equipment, this contractor is responsible for coordinating these changes with the other trades prior to ordering of equipment. If there should be any additional work incurred by the other trades as a result of this contractor’s equipment selection, all costs associated with the additional work shall be borne by this contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURING STANDARDS

A. Materials shall be new and approved and labeled by UL wherever standards have been established by that agency. Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of installation or test shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer. Materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design. All items of the same type and rating shall be identical.




2.2 TRADE NAMES

A. Unless specifically identified otherwise, manufacturers' names and catalog numbers indicated herein and on the drawings are not intended to be proprietary designations. They are to indicate general type and quality of materials and equipment required. Equipment and materials by other manufacturers which in the opinion of the Engineer are of equal quality and which will produce the same results with regard to both their ability to perform the required technical functions as well as to their appearance in the specific location on this project will be considered.

2.3 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All motors shall have disconnecting means, controller and thermal overload protection. All three phase motors shall have power loss, phase outage, and phase reversal protection features.

B. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, integral disconnects, and contactors shall conform to the requirements defined under the same specification division specifying the equipment. If there is no specification for motors and controllers under the division specifying the equipment, then motors and controllers shall be as defined under the electrical provisions of the specifications. Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted. Control voltage for controllers and contactors shall not exceed 120 volts nominal. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

C. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment under the electrical provisions of the contract. Control wiring and conduit shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment. Wiring and conduit for power systems and control systems shall conform to the requirements defined under the electrical provisions of the specifications.

2.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Reasonable amounts of electricity will be made available to the Contractor for the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for extending the electricity to the specific required locations within the project.




2.5 GROUNDING

A. The entire electrical system, including equipment frames, conduit, switches, controllers, wireways, neutral conductors, and all other such equipment shall be permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with the NEC. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel, 3/4" diameter by 10'-0" long. Grounding of each transformer secondary shall be provided and each shall be considered as a separate service ground. Provide a separate insulated ground conductor in all branch circuit conduits sized in accordance with the N.E.C. Provide minimum #6 ground conductor in conduit from the building main service ground to the telephone backboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK

A. The schedule of the electrical work shall be arranged to suit the progress of work by the other trades and shall in no way retard progress of construction of the project.

B. Work under this Division shall proceed in advance of the work of others whenever possible, eliminating all cutting and patching. When such procedure is impossible, cutting and patching shall be done in an approved manner. Cutting shall not endanger structural integrity in any way. Patching shall exactly match contiguous work. Actual work of cutting and patching of existing surfaces shall be performed by the subcontractor who originally prepared these surfaces, e.g., cutting and patching of masonry wall will be performed by the masonry subcontractor. Costs of such cutting and patching shall be borne by the Electrical contractor. Cutting shall be carefully done and damage to building, piping, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of trade involved.

3.2 STORAGE AND MATERIALS

A. Space will be assigned to the Contractor by the Owner for the storage of materials. This Contractor will be responsible for the protection and safekeeping of materials, tools, and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be kept in its assigned place until the time of its installation. Excess materials, dirt and refuse shall be promptly removed from the work site.




3.3 LABELING OF EQUIPMENT

A. All panelboards, cabinets, transformers, safety switches, motor disconnect switches, and motor controllers shall be identified by machine engraved laminated plastic designation plates permanently attached thereto with self-tapping screws or rivets. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate, giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial and model number and electrical characteristics in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a subcontractor or distributor will not be acceptable. Self-adhesive, plastic laminate labels are not acceptable.

B. All switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers shall be field marked to warn personnel of the potential for Arc Flash. Labels shall state “WARNING – ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD APPROPRIATE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) REQUIRED”.

3.4 OTHER TRADES

A. Excavation shall be performed in accordance with the section of these specifications which cover excavating, filling and backfilling.

B. Concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the section of these specifications which cover concrete.

C. Painting shall be performed in accordance with the section of these specifications which cover painting. Paint all exposed conduit as well as cabinets and related items which are not supplied with a factory finish. Touch up all factory finishes damaged during installation or by adjacent construction work.

3.5 COORDINATION

A. Cooperate and coordinate efforts with all Contractors on the project. This is especially important in determining exact locations of all switches, receptacles and lighting fixtures. Arrange lighting fixtures in accordance with the architectural reflected ceiling plans unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate lighting fixture locations with grilles, diffusers, access panels, etc. Verify ceiling and wall construction and material prior to ordering lighting fixtures or other devices to ensure proper fixture or device is furnished to match construction. This verification must be executed regardless of information placed on the drawings. Any cost incurred which in the opinion of the Engineer, could have been avoided by this step shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate switch locations with thermostats, control switches, etc.




B. Carefully check space requirements with the other subcontractors to insure that electrical equipment can be installed in the spaces allotted for them. Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintained about all electrical equipment as required by the National Electrical Code. Consult all applicable drawings for details. Where interferences occur and work must be relocated, relocate without additional cost.

C. No conduit, outlet box, conduit stub-up, or any other electrical devices shall be installed until the exact location has been determined by the coordinated effort of all Subcontractors and other parties concerned. Any relocating of devices or cutting or patching which becomes necessary due to improper coordination shall be done at this Contractor's expense.

D. Determine electrical requirements of other Divisions in order to fully understand wiring, and provide as required for complete and satisfactory operation of project. Make connections for other Divisions where indicated.

E. Obtain approved shop drawings showing wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, roughing-in and hookup details, from other involved contractors for all equipment and comply therewith.

3.6 GUARANTEE OF WORK

A. Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the contract that all work installed is free from any and all defects in workmanship and/or materials, and that the apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified, and that if, during the period of one year or as otherwise specified, from date of certificate of completion and acceptance of the work any such defects in workmanship, material or performance appear, he will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from Engineer. In default thereof, the Owner may have such work done and charge cost to Contractor. Equipment guarantees from date of "start-up" will not be recognized.

B. Comply, also, with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions and the applicable Sections of Division 01 General Requirements.

C. Provide service for the installation for one year from date of final acceptance. This shall include all emergency service and adjustment. Provide evidence upon request by the Engineer that a factory authorized local service organization is in existence to service and furnish spare and replacement parts for all equipment under this Division of the specifications.

D. Compile and assemble and provide all shop drawings, maintenance manuals, operation manuals and warranties in a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.




3.7 CLEANING

A. Refer to Division 01 closeout procedures or final cleaning sections for general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps.

END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Types THW-2, THHN-2-THWN-2, and XHHW-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, or XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway.




B. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with ground. Stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS

A. Conceal conduits in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be pulled by hand and without aid of block and tackle or other mechanical device. Only approved equipment for pulling conductors shall be used for #6 and larger conductors.

D. Install exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. All wiring shall be in conduit unless otherwise noted.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test all conductors #6 and larger for continuity and insulation resistance.




2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.




D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, size as indicated. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits.

B. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-B.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a minimum 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.




C. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with specified requirements. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1, NECA 101 and NECA 120.

C. Conduit Support Devices: Steel for indoor and malleable-iron with nest-back for exterior hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.




D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black, galvanized, and stainless.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101 and 120 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as maximum of 8 feet on center. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.




C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101 and 120 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structural members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps complying with Spring-tension clamps.7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.




3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete unless otherwise noted on drawings.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

END OF SECTION


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Surface raceways.3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.b. Type: Compression.




3. Expansion Fittings: PVC-coated or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

H. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum or galvanized cast iron with gasketed cover.

F. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

G. Device Box Dimensions: Except as noted hereinafter minimum size outlet box shall be 4" square, 1 1/2" deep, and shall be increased in dimensions to accommodate conductors, conduits, and devices as required by the NEC. Shallower boxes may be used where required by structural conditions and when specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer. Provide raised ring to accommodate the wiring device.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC, or PVC – coated steel conduit .2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, or PVC – coated steel conduit or EMT.3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC or IMC.3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch above grade or finish floor and 3/4-inch below grade, below floor, or in concrete floor.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings and where approved by the Owner or Architect.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101 and NECA 120 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

D. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. In addition conduits shall not be run concealed in fire rated shaft or stairwell walls unless specifically required to serve the shaft or stairwell. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

E. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

F. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

G. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or GRC for raceways.2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors No. 4 AWG and larger.

K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-inch trade size, and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/4-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.




M. Surface Raceways:

1. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

O. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

P. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.

2. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

R. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.




U. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

V. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Sleeve-seal fittings.4. Grout.5. Silicone sealants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.




2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.




3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves as walls are erected. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.




D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Instruction signs.6. Equipment identification labels.7. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.




D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Equipment Identification Labels, and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Attach all signs and labels with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box with the circuit number and panelboard of circuits within.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. Color shall be factory applied for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral: White

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral: Gray.

d. Common Conductors

1) Ground: Green




e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

D. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs or metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on white background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply warning to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

E. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

F. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer .

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.




1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or stenciled legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).4. Enclosures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 30 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, all current ratings at 600-V ac, and 240V ac 60 A and Larger: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.




C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240V ac, 30 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, all current ratings at 600-V ac, and 240V ac 60 A and Larger: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

C. For circuit breakers 1200A and greater provide breaker with energy-reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator.




2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise noted.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices.

C. Comply with NECA 1.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT MANUAL ORF HVAC RENOVATION

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL ORF HVAC RENOVATION